Documentación LSO.
-
Upload
stonechild -
Category
Documents
-
view
303 -
download
1
Transcript of Documentación LSO.
Configuration ofSAP Learning Solution
SAP Enterprise Learning
SAP enhancement packagefor SAP ERP 6 0
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 2
Copyright
copy Copyright 2007 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietarysoftware components of other software vendors
Microsoft Windows Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX S390 AS400OS390 OS400 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries zOS AFP Intelligent MinerWebSphere Netfinity Tivoli Informix i5OS POWER POWER5 OpenPower and PowerPCare trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg WorldWide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape
MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB Sweden
SAP R3 mySAP mySAPcom xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world All otherproduct and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companiesData contained in this document serves informational purposes only National productspecifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAPAG and its affiliated companies (SAP Group) for informational purposes only withoutrepresentation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors oromissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products andservices are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying suchproducts and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting anadditional warranty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 3
Icons in Body Text
Icon Meaning
Caution
Example
Note
Recommendation
Syntax
Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance For more information see Help on Help General InformationClasses and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of anyversion of SAP Library
Typographic Conventions
Type Style Description
Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen These include fieldnames screen titles pushbuttons labels menu names menu pathsand menu options
Cross-references to other documentation
Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text graphic titles and tabletitles
EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects These include report namesprogram names transaction codes table names and key concepts of aprogramming language when they are surrounded by body text forexample SELECT and INCLUDE
Example text Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and theirpaths messages names of variables and parameters source text andnames of installation upgrade and database tools
Example text Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation
ltExample textgt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem
EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8
System Connections 9
Creating an RFC Destination 9
Creating a Trusted Relationship 9
Importing the WAS Certificate 9
Swapping Public Keys 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9
Configuring Content Management 9
Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9
Configuring the Learning Portal 9
Configuring Content Player 9
Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9
Configuring Adobe Connect 9
Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9
Copying Logical Ports 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components
SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)
For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution
PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6
We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage
ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation
Document Storage LocationDocument Location
Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide
servicesapcominstguides
Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System
Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Library helpsapcom
Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system
SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes
servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide
Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)
servicesapcomti
Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide
These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides
Implementation Guide (IMG)
This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 2
Copyright
copy Copyright 2007 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietarysoftware components of other software vendors
Microsoft Windows Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX S390 AS400OS390 OS400 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries zOS AFP Intelligent MinerWebSphere Netfinity Tivoli Informix i5OS POWER POWER5 OpenPower and PowerPCare trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg WorldWide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape
MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB Sweden
SAP R3 mySAP mySAPcom xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world All otherproduct and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companiesData contained in this document serves informational purposes only National productspecifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAPAG and its affiliated companies (SAP Group) for informational purposes only withoutrepresentation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors oromissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products andservices are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying suchproducts and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting anadditional warranty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 3
Icons in Body Text
Icon Meaning
Caution
Example
Note
Recommendation
Syntax
Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance For more information see Help on Help General InformationClasses and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of anyversion of SAP Library
Typographic Conventions
Type Style Description
Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen These include fieldnames screen titles pushbuttons labels menu names menu pathsand menu options
Cross-references to other documentation
Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text graphic titles and tabletitles
EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects These include report namesprogram names transaction codes table names and key concepts of aprogramming language when they are surrounded by body text forexample SELECT and INCLUDE
Example text Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and theirpaths messages names of variables and parameters source text andnames of installation upgrade and database tools
Example text Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation
ltExample textgt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem
EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8
System Connections 9
Creating an RFC Destination 9
Creating a Trusted Relationship 9
Importing the WAS Certificate 9
Swapping Public Keys 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9
Configuring Content Management 9
Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9
Configuring the Learning Portal 9
Configuring Content Player 9
Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9
Configuring Adobe Connect 9
Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9
Copying Logical Ports 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components
SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)
For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution
PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6
We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage
ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation
Document Storage LocationDocument Location
Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide
servicesapcominstguides
Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System
Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Library helpsapcom
Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system
SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes
servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide
Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)
servicesapcomti
Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide
These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides
Implementation Guide (IMG)
This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 3
Icons in Body Text
Icon Meaning
Caution
Example
Note
Recommendation
Syntax
Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance For more information see Help on Help General InformationClasses and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of anyversion of SAP Library
Typographic Conventions
Type Style Description
Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen These include fieldnames screen titles pushbuttons labels menu names menu pathsand menu options
Cross-references to other documentation
Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text graphic titles and tabletitles
EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects These include report namesprogram names transaction codes table names and key concepts of aprogramming language when they are surrounded by body text forexample SELECT and INCLUDE
Example text Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and theirpaths messages names of variables and parameters source text andnames of installation upgrade and database tools
Example text Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation
ltExample textgt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem
EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8
System Connections 9
Creating an RFC Destination 9
Creating a Trusted Relationship 9
Importing the WAS Certificate 9
Swapping Public Keys 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9
Configuring Content Management 9
Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9
Configuring the Learning Portal 9
Configuring Content Player 9
Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9
Configuring Adobe Connect 9
Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9
Copying Logical Ports 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components
SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)
For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution
PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6
We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage
ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation
Document Storage LocationDocument Location
Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide
servicesapcominstguides
Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System
Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Library helpsapcom
Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system
SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes
servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide
Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)
servicesapcomti
Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide
These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides
Implementation Guide (IMG)
This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8
System Connections 9
Creating an RFC Destination 9
Creating a Trusted Relationship 9
Importing the WAS Certificate 9
Swapping Public Keys 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9
Configuring Content Management 9
Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9
Configuring the Learning Portal 9
Configuring Content Player 9
Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9
Configuring Adobe Connect 9
Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9
Copying Logical Ports 9
Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components
SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)
For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution
PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6
We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage
ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation
Document Storage LocationDocument Location
Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide
servicesapcominstguides
Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System
Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Library helpsapcom
Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system
SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes
servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide
Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)
servicesapcomti
Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide
These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides
Implementation Guide (IMG)
This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5
Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components
SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release
SAP Application Components with Lowest Release
SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60
LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)
LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)
LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)
LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)
ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)
For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution
PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6
We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage
ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation
Document Storage LocationDocument Location
Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide
servicesapcominstguides
Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System
Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Library helpsapcom
Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system
SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes
servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide
Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)
servicesapcomti
Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide
These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides
Implementation Guide (IMG)
This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6
We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage
ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified
Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation
Document Storage LocationDocument Location
Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide
servicesapcominstguides
Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System
Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Library helpsapcom
Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system
SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes
servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide
Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)
servicesapcomti
Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide
These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides
Implementation Guide (IMG)
This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7
configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess
Business Scenario Description
This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component
SAP Library
This documentation describes the different SAP components
System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample
Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system
Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed
Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape
PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed
Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios
You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade
Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed
Creating an RFC Destination
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)
R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8
must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system
You set up the connection in this step
ProcedureNavigation
Menu Path IMG Activity
Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration
Set RFC Connection
1 Enter the RFC destination
Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name
Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise
2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system
3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection
4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page
a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system
b Select the logon language
If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied
c Set the Current User indicator
If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used
Creating a Trusted Relationship
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system
For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9
PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server
The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)
You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system
Procedure
1 Call transaction SMT1
2 Choose Create
3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system
4 Confirm your entries
When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems
ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed
Importing the WAS Certificate
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)
ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2
Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package
1 Choose Certificate Import
2 Choose the SAP System tab page
3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server
4 Select SSO2 as the application
5 Confirm your entries
The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears
6 Log on to the Web Application Server
7 Choose Add to Certificate List
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10
8 Choose Insert in ACL
9 Save your entries
Swapping Public Keys
You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems
UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS
You must perform the following steps
Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution
Export the created PSE from the front-end system
Import the exported PSE to the back-end system
Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems
Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters
2 Choose New Entries
3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application
4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data
5 Save your entries
6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen
7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen
Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST
Perform the following steps
1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)
2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu
A dialog box appears
3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11
4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created
5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export
6 Save your entries
Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST
Perform the following steps
1 In the left side of the screen select the File node
2 Choose PSE Import
3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system
4 Choose PSE Save As
A dialog box appears
5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application
6 Confirm your entry
7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available
8 Save your entries
Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps
Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal
Set up Single Sign-On
Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles
The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product
The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal
For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12
Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section
This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo
Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system
Perform the following steps
1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape
2 Create a new back-end system
a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client
b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path
c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry
Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver
User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)
For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication
User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine
This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On
Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied
So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13
For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal
Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link
Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)
Setting up a root folder
Creating users
Entering authorizations
Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution
There are two ways to create a root folder
Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this
To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder
4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)
You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example
Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository
For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS
Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse
WebDAV Features
You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS
You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14
information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS
Accessing the Root Folder
You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP
The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps
1 Start the portal
2 Switch to the folder that was created
3 Choose Goto Details
4 Choose Settings Properties
5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address
ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt
Setting Up UsersRoot Folder
To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations
The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution
Content Player
In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal
Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways
You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time
Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing
The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution
Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player
To define authorizations for the root folder
1 Start the portal
2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories
3 Switch to the folder that was created
4 Choose Goto Details
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15
5 Choose Settings Links
You now have three options for setting up authorizations
a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control
b Assign specific authorizations for individual users
Read authorization for Content Player users
Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment
c Assign authorizations based on roles
Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)
Assign users the respective role
Assign the roles the appropriate authorization
Check
1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created
2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser
3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again
Alternative Content Management Systems
If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg
Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)
In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)
Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo
Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment
Procedure
1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150
2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150
You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16
3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE
4 Open the SDA file (zip file)
5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150
6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly
Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content
You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution
Procedure
1 Start the portal
2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations
3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration
4 Choose Create to generate a new index
5 Enter the following parameters for the new index
Choose any identifier as the ID
For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index
Enter TREX Search as the Service Category
Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index
You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index
The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool
It is as follows tcpipserverport
Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured
Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps
Adding own pages to the Learning Portal
Adjusting style sheets
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17
Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways
Replace entire pages
Replace pages in a particular context
Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page
Enter the transaction code SM31
Perform the following steps
1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C
2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page
3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application
To replace the standard information page enter
Alias Info page
Plan version Empty
Object type Empty
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page infohtm
To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01 (or blank)
Object type D
Object ID Empty
BSP application z_learning
BSP page trainingstypehtm
You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal
Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal
To change a page in a particular context enter
Alias Details
Plan version 01
Object type L
Object ID 55500555
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18
BSP application z_learning
BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm
Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application
If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology
UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets
Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps
Creating a user
To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Adjusting style sheets
Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements
Configuring the player and checking the configuration
1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities
All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player
Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies
Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19
2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig
Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation
Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization
3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields
Entries for Configuration
Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used
(back-end or training managementsystem)
EL1
Client Client used in the back-end system 100
Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver
System Number System number of the back-endsystem used
00
User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
LSO_CP
Password Users password
Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE
CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)
For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections
User Management
Authorizations
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
CMS_User
CMS Password CMS users password
If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20
4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again
5 Go back
6 You can select from the following options
To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh
To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check
To change an existing configuration choose Configure
To delete an existing configuration choose Delete
Result
Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page
The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system
The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player
Whether the Content Management System can be accessed
Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false
CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User
Http-Repository [ServerURL=
httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory
ok
Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user
Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)
The path for a standalone installation is
usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21
usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle
There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table
Style Sheet Function
maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed
footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed
toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents
acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode
navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path
The following provides numerous adjustments as examples
Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line
background-colour
3 Change the color code according to your requirements
4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin
Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows
1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice
2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)
b background-repeat no-repeat
c background-position right
3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server
Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22
ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps
1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role
2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment
3 Assign the new role to the Learner user
Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution
Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room
PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04
Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported
ProcedurePerform the following steps
1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986
If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986
2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23
SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product
UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect
Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations
PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct
Procedure
1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect
For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578
2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system
3 If necessary copy the required logical ports
Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect
For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights
Editing File sap_servlet_configxml
1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect
If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24
2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber
Creating Users with Administrator Rights
1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO
2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights
3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml
4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server
The servlet is now ready to process queries
Checking File customini
1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini
HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id
HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001
2 If these lines do not exist add them
Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
lthostgt
applicationserver1com
lthostgt
lthostgt
applicationserver2com
lthostgt
lttrusted_hostsgt
ltadmin_usergt
AdminLSO
ltadmin_usergt
lthttp_timeoutgt
10000
lthttp_timeoutgt
ltprotocolgt
http
ltprotocolgt
lthostgt
localhost
lthostgt
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25
ltportgt
80
ltportgt
ltpathgt
apixml
ltpathgt
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
x-user-id
ltexternal_user_id_headergt
ltverbosegt
no
ltverbosegt
ltsap_servlet_configgt
Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path
PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost
Procedure
1 Start transaction SM59
2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server
3 Choose Create
4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM
5 Save your entries
6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly
7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages
ResultThe connection test displays the following data
Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning
Test Message Meaning
Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26
Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml
Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up
Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up
User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect
Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]
Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients
CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST
CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY
CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST
ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor
SAP Documentation 01082007
Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27
Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
Procedure
1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages
2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page
3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link
For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link
ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor